Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. Finally.

2 .

electrical. such as mechanical equipment. fixtures. such as duct. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Germany. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. 3 . and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical panels. and piping. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and plumbing engineering workflows. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Add basic MEP elements. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial.

Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. You do not design entire systems. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. annotations. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. On the Contents tab. After completing each exercise. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. views. For example. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. NOTE Depending on your installation. However. to provide a richer and more finished design. you can choose to save your work. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. and sheets to document the project. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. So. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. as well as how to open and save them. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. is located and accessed in the training files location. When you open a training file. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. such as templates and families. In this exercise. Metric file names have an _m suffix. templates. however. your Training folder may be in a different location. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Create schedules. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Create detail views. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. when you add ductwork. Contact your CAD manager for more information. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. you learn where the training files are located. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . and tags.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. For example. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. When you install the training files as instructed. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product.

■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. 3 In the right pane. 8 If you have made changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. a list of file types displays. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. you are prompted to save the changes.rvt and make changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. verify that Project Files (*. and click Open. click ➤ Save As. and you can open any supported file type. double-click Imperial or Metric. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 4 Click the training file name. For Files of type. For example. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. Accessing Training Files | 5 . enter the new file name.rvt) is selected. and click the Training Files icon. the Open dialog displays. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. scroll down. if you open settings. For File name. You may close the file with or without saving changes.

6 .

every drawing sheet. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. sections. 2D and 3D view. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. scope. ■ ■ 7 . you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. schedules. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition. and schedules required for a building project. drawing sheets. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and plans. drawings. In the Revit MEP model. the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the door retains this relationship to the partition. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. hence. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. quantities. the parameter is one of association or connection. the hierarchy of elements. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and phases when you need it. If the length of the elevation is changed. In this case. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. You learn the terminology. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work.

ducts. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. levels. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. tags. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. Datum elements help to define project context. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. boilers. and electrical panels. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and electrical panels. tags. filled regions. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and 2D detail components. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Examples include detail lines. sprinklers. sinks. grids. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sprinklers. and reference planes are datum elements. For example. For example. boilers. They display in relevant views of the design. When you change something. For example. sinks.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. They help to describe or document the design. dimensions. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. walls and ceilings are hosts. ducts.

For example. such as roofs. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. and ceilings. families. The project file contains all information for the building design. first floor. elevation views. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. or bottom of foundation. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. views of the project. and types. By using a single project file. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. To place levels. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. for example. floors. In Revit MEP. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and drawings of the design. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. North . you can explicitly control them. you do nothing to establish these relationships. and so forth). top of wall. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. from geometry to construction data.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Most often. In other cases. programming is not required. If you can draw. schedules. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. However. Often. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. you must be in a section or elevation view. This information includes components used to design the model. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Project: In Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. section views. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP.

System families include ducts. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . pipes. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. showing. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. each in-place family contains only a single type. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. hiding. Type: Each family can have several types. You can also display several project views at one time. A type can be a specific size of a family. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Unlike system and standard component families. System families can be transferred between projects. With a few clicks. Then experiment with them. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. For example. For example. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties).Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. identical use. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). and similar graphical representation. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. such as a 30” X 42” title block. and wires. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. A type can also be a style. However. For example. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface.

2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon.

many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. project and system parameters. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools used for editing existing elements. select the tool first. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and CAD files. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. and settings. then select what you want to modify. When working on the Modify tab.. data and systems. and for switching views.. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . architect-specific tools.

click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . For example. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. closes the application menu (double-click). Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. provides requested information. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides access to common tools. To keep a panel expanded. By default. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. displays frequently used tools. when adding duct.

click. (Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a file to open. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. such as Export and Publish.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Open) save the current drawing.. select a template and create a new drawing.. (Save As) export the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

or template file.. provides views including Default 3D. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. to. but is not enabled by default. and Walkthrough. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. click. annotation.On the application menu. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. family. To enable or disable a tool item.. (Print) access product and license information. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. or template file. family. publish the current project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. saves a current project. (Licensing) close the file. Camera.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.

repeat the command. check the Status Bar. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Group. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. When you are using a command. In addition. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Modify. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). when you switch to another editing mode.To undo or redo a series of operations. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. When you are highlighting an element or component. workshared components. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. However. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. or the Family Editor. Clipboard. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. displaying the same information. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. To show the Status Bar again. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. This displays the command history in a list. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Starting with the most recent command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. To hide the Status Bar.

Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. On the Quick Access toolbar. When you place an element in a drawing. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. click (Modify). Place a Wall.To cancel or exit the current command. select one or more elements of the same category. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. To change existing elements to a different type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. for example.

Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. For example. After you are familiar with these tasks. 1 Click ➤ Open.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.rvt. In the following steps.

The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 9 To display SteeringWheels. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms in on the selected area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. To modify or add snap increments. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. click . When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 5 Click Zoom To Fit. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 6 Click in the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . In the drawing area. on the Navigation bar. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.

To define settings for SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. ➤ Options. and click tin the Options dialog. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. As you move the mouse.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. press ESC. 14 To exit the wheel. Click and drag to orbit the design. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.

Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. as shown. After you are familiar with these tasks. display along the ends. and open Level 2 . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.Design. referred to as shape handles.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.HVAC Plan . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Enter ZR. called drag controls. These are the drag controls. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Small blue dots. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and select the duct. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. bottoms. Similar controls.

All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Move.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the Undo command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. or press CTRL+Z. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 6 On the Undo menu. In this example. select the first item in the list.

The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. as shown. for example. click to specify the starting position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. In this case. and drag it to the left as shown. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. After selecting the element to move.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Some commands. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and click again to specify the ending position. you want to move the duct.

click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Select Mechanical . Click OK. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. such as the Modify Ducts command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. For example. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 14 Enter VG. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 13 To end a command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Press ESC twice. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Supply.Return. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.End a command Some commands.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 5 In the New Project dialog. under Template file. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. create and manage views. such as the default project units and settings. New projects inherit all the families. 6 Click OK. link files. such as coordination review and interference checking. click Browse. and loadable families. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. you learn how to start a project from a template. click Training files. under Create new. In that case. settings. You can choose from several templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and modify system settings. and click Open. such as ducts and pipes. Finally. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. select Project. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. use copy/monitor. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 27 . 2 In the New Project dialog. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. system families. and geometry from the starting template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.rte template. You can either select a template from the template library. the default building levels and standard views. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it.

for City. For example. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. navigate to Imperial Templates.rte template and click Open. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. Click Cancel. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. select School or University. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click (Browse). When you select the material. (Browse). 10 Using the same method. In the Choose Template dialog. 8 In the drawing area. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. click Edit. For Location. Click OK. NH. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select Project template. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. click Browse. review the construction materials listed.7 In the Project Browser. you can select it now. select Level 1. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). ■ ■ For Ground Plane. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select Manchester. ■ For Building Construction. create another new project using the Construction template. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Click OK twice. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. and open North. under Energy Analysis. ■ ■ Under Create new. for Energy Data.

plumbing. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 3 1/2". click Wiring. select Identity Data. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click Rectangular. For Categories. 22 In the right pane. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 4 1/2". For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 4 1/2". and 12 1/2". Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 26 In the right pane. 10 1/2". For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Holding CTRL. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 11 1/2". 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 5 1/2". 25 In the left pane. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for 3/4".rfa and click Open. and fire protection systems. 23 In the left pane. click Sizes. After standard settings have been established for an organization. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 27 Click OK. wiring. power distribution systems. for 3 1/2". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. under Pipe Settings. Click OK twice.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. and 5 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . select Views. 24 In the right pane. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. click Round. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Duct Settings. 33 Click OK. and demand factors for electrical systems. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. piping. under Duct Settings. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.

35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. under Create new.Origin to Origin. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. families. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Click Open. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Family and Type. From the Positioning list. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Linking Projects In this exercise. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. To enable this coordination.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Notice that the file is saved as a template. and groups that are contained in a project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. You need to create the MEP model for the project. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. click Training. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Sort by. under Template file. select Sub-Discipline. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click OK.rvt. select Auto . For Then by. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Associated Level. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog. select View Name. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. sheets. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Project. In addition. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 38 Close the file. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. For Then by.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

templates. click the My Library icon. and click (Browse). and click OK twice. and Import dialogs. Save. ➤ Open. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and change the name to My Library. and select it as the library path. click My Library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click Open. Load. click (Add Value). 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .11 In the Places dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 15 Under Library Name. or families. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects.

This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 3 Under Settings. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 11 In the Options dialog.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 22 Select My Library. If you work in a large office. 14 Click in the drawing area. view the current path. 21 On the File Locations tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. select Ignore words in uppercase. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. click Edit. click Places. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 20 Click ➤ Options. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 8 Under Building industry dictionary. This path is determined during installation. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. such as bump maps. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. and decal image files. 27 Click OK. 5 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. specify the new location here. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. 9 In the text editor. custom color files. If you want to relocate this path. 23 Click 24 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 19 Click Cancel.

17 In the Spelling dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. work with snapping turned off.. 6 In the Snaps dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 20 Under Settings. 19 In the Options dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. 21 Under Personal dictionary.rte. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Edit. 4 In the New Project dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options. In this exercise. under Dimension Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Close. under Template file. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 22 In the text editor. click OK. and enter 1 . click Browse. click Restore Defaults. click OK. 25 Close the file without saving it. you modify snap settings. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click the Spelling tab. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. As you zoom in and out within a view. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 23 In the text editor. you modify snap increments. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .

enter SM. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and move the cursor to the right. such as ZO to zoom out. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. 8 In the Snaps dialog. use the wheel button on your mouse. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. snapping reverts to the system default settings. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. deselect Chain. While sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. For example. This is the increment that you added previously. If you do not have a wheel button. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.7 Under Object Snaps. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. If it does not. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click OK. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. TIP To zoom while sketching.

the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Do not set the wall end point. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and delete the value 1’ . Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. it will snap to the endpoints. the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 25 Click OK. If you move the cursor along the wall. with or without saving it. and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and the wall edges. 22 Move the cursor downward. Notice that snapping is once again active. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 26 Close the file. 19 Enter SM. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and move the cursor to the right..

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

autodesk. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. water source heat pump (WSHP). you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This system consists of a cooling tower. If the tutorial training files are not present. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. After finishing each exercise. go to http://www. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In this lesson. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. As you create the mechanical system. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. At the end of the tutorial. However. By following the recommended workflow. 45 . you design a mechanical system for an office building. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and then you create a plenum level. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you first plan the system. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you will understand the process. In this exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. methodology. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you first configure the linked architectural model.

Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. In this section. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.Space Plan is highlighted. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. ceilings. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. roof. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. select Room Bounding. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and click OK. These components are defined in the architectural training file. under Constraints. not in the MEP training file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. Next. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. click to select it. you add a level for plenums. NOTE When working with a linked file. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and after the linked model highlights. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and double-click West . 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 9 On the Draw panel. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. The new level is placed. Click Plan View Types. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Preparing Spaces | 47 .6 In the Project Browser.MEP. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4).Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 16 Press Esc. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and click OK. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. For Offset. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and in the Plan View Types dialog. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and enter Level 2 Plenum. enter 8'.

select Design.Plenum. For View Classification. ■ Click OK twice. For Sub-Discipline. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you can choose to save your work.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. select Plenum Plan.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and for Offset. In the next exercise. Under View Depth. select Level Above (Level 3). In this exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for Level. for View Range. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this exercise. 20 In the Project Browser. and then place spaces in various types of areas. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and click Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 2 Plenum. for Default View Template. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Under Identity Data. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. For Cut plane. select MEP . This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit. for Top. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 0. for View Scale. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. However. enter an Offset of 1' 0". you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. Under Extents. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE After finishing each exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays.

enter 0. Placing Spaces | 49 . select New. For Upper Limit. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. select Horizontal.rvt. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. walls. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. select Level 2 Plenum. For Space. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and ceilings). Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Space Plan is highlighted. For (Tag Location).

Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. ensuring coordination between the files. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. enter Library. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . for Number. Click OK. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 219. For Name. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Select the space.7 Click to place the space. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 14 In the drawing area.

17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. enter 0. Placing Spaces | 51 . 20 Click in the Library to place the space. For Upper Limit. 21 Using the method learned previously. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. select Level 3. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and then click Modify.

you place a space in a large corridor area. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 23 Click OK. under Energy Analysis. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

5 On the Options Bar. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Level 3. and then press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Upper Limit. and for Offset. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.

7 In the Project Browser. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. the plan view would have updated with the changes. enter Corridor. 9 In the floor plan. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and press Enter. and scroll to the newly placed space. change the space number to 216A. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. In the schedule. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 10 Using the same method. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which was numbered 219Q. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 11 Close the schedule view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. double-click the space name. as shown. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.

17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. If necessary.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). you place a space in a chase. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. click Training Files.

enter 4'. 10 In the plan view.4 Press Esc. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Upper Limit. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Interior and Reference. enter Chase. select Roof Level. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. click in the chase area to place the space. enter 225PC. On the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter 0. For Offset. 12 Click in the section view. 6 Enter VG. For Number. for Upper Limit. select Level 3. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select the space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. In the plan view. For Limit Offset. right-click. expand Spaces. and then click OK. Under Identity Data. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. for Name. but that the space does not fill the entire chase.

In the next exercises. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and maximize the view. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Type ZF. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.Space Plan. floors. All spaces in the view are tagged. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. ceilings. 15 Press Esc. under Loaded Tags. and click OK. select Space Tag With Volume.Bounding elements (such as walls. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines.rvt. it is automatically added to the Default zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Spaces. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. indicating that it’s the active view. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building.Zoning is highlighted. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 1 In the Project Browser. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. which removes the space from the Default zone. click Reference. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. click Training Files. In this exercise. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). After a space is placed in an area. click View ➤ Zones. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. As you do this.Zoning is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and a new zone is created. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. and click Finish Editing Zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. select Computer Lab 222. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. click Reference. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. the Edit Zone tab displays. under Spaces. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Occupiable. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. you assign spaces to a zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. Instruction 221. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Training Files. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and modify the zone properties. To display space reference lines.5 In the System Browser. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Zone tool is active. Using the Edit Zone tab. The graphic in the System Browser updates. indicating that the space is occupiable. 4 In the drawing area. Next.

The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. select HVAC Zones. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .In the System Browser. Click OK. you need to activate the zone visibility. Expand HVAC Zones. type VG. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Instruction. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 5 With the drawing area active. To view the zone in the drawing area.

3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Finish Editing Zone. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Area B. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i.West . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Reference. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. To display space reference lines. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. In this exercise. 9 In the System Browser.West . click Training Files.rvt. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. for Name.Zoning. under Identity Data. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. enter 2 . and click OK. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. You activated zone visibility in the views. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and verify the zone in the System Browser. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 11 Close the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. expand 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

zoom out. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.5 Click in the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Verify that the distance is 1/2".Zoning view.Zoning floor plan.Zoning view. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Select Attached End. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. click in the Level 2 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view to activate it. 8 In the Level 1 .

you verify the building. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and zone information. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. double-click the zone tag. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. click Training Files. click the corner where the Top. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.rvt. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Front. double-click Level 1 . 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. for Name Value. on the ViewCube. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.East.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. space. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning view. enter Lounge .Zoning to make it the active view. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. and click OK.

■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. Next. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. verify that Wireframe is selected. click (Isolate). you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). you isolate the space. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Click (Highlight). ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Using the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . and select 109 Lounge.

Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab.■ On the Details tab. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and click OK. select Lounge/Recreation. select 1_South_Lounge. Below the list of spaces and zones. and then click OK. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. click . and in the Space Type Settings dialog. For Electrical Loads. the space information displays for the selected space. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. ■ ■ ■ Next. and then click OK. For People. and in the People dialog. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Construction Type. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. select 109 Lounge. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. click . Next. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary.

highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .00 °F : N/A is specified. floors. heating air temperature. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and dehumidification set point. This indicates the cooling set point. outdoor air per area. This indicates the heating set point. verify that <Building> is selected. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and humidification set point. and other room-bounding components. cooling air temperature. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. verify that 74. For Cooling Information. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and air changes per hour. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. This indicates the outdoor air per person. Next.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. roofs. Below the list of spaces and zones. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. the zone information displays for the selected zone.00 °F : 90.00 °F : 54. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. For Heating Information. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. click (Shading). verify that 70. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.00 °F : N/A is specified.

select Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Offset. for Number. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Under Energy Analysis. enter 212P. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. For Name. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Click OK. select Plenum.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. enter 0. click Cancel. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. open MEP . Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 15 In the Project Browser.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Level 3. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify space properties 19 Select the space.

select School or University. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i.rvt. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit. for City. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. enter 03101. and select space Plenum 212P. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. click Training Files. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click in the Value field. verify that Manchester. for Energy Data. under Energy Analysis. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. you verified building. double-click Level 2 . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and zone information. In this exercise. On the Place tab. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. space. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. For Postal Code. NH. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . and verify that the space has replaced the void. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. is selected. For Location.Space Plan. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.

In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that Level 1 is selected. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. Under Heat Gain (per Person). a cooling load. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Export Complexity. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 1' 0" is specified. for Building Service. For Project Phase. For Sliver Space Tolerance. select Library . and click OK. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. or neither. For People. For Ground Plane. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. under Volume Computations. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. If. ft. for Values. select Specified. Click OK twice. and click OK. For Building Construction. enter 150 Btu/h. For Condition Type. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. enter 200 Btu/h. you need to select this option. For Space Type. verify that <Building> is specified. ■ On the Weather tab. and click OK. In order to select a space. and then click . after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. right-click. verify that Occupiable is selected. both. and enter 50 sq. Select Area per person.Audio Visual. click Edit. select Specified. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. this option adjusts the times automatically. select Heated and cooled. and click Element Properties. click in the Value column. For Sensible. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. select space Library 219. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. for Values. 8 In the drawing area. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Latent. verify that New Construction is selected. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. click Calculate. and under Heating Information. and can be modified here. is specified. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Under Power. select Actual. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Actual. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. There should be no warnings displayed. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Next. and click OK. For Building Construction. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Select the space associated with the warning. For Building Service. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. You should correct the space error in the building model. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. click Edit. You have verified the building information. For Electrical Loads. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. and click to learn the cause for the warning. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . verify that Manchester. For Location. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. 12 Click the Details tab. for Values. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected.■ ■ ■ Click OK. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. select 219 Library. verify that School or University is selected. click Information). 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. NH. Click OK twice. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. for Values. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Click OK. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads.Space Plan. under Energy Analysis. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Review the loads report for project. For Color Scheme. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 3 In the drawing area.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 21 Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. and a loads report displays. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. In this exercise. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.rvt. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 22 Close the file with or without saving it. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. weather. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. or zone information. or make any changes to the model. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and zone information for the building model. space. space. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. click Training Files. select HVAC Zones. 16 After you review the loads report. 19 In the drawing area. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select 219 Library. 17 In the loads report.

select the color scheme legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The new scheme displays in the view. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . and click OK. in 1-ton increments. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select Tonnage Range. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. under Schemes.5 Zoom in to the legend.

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 11 Using the method learned previously. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Click OK. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .12 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Space Airflow Schedule. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.Space Fill is the active view. select Spaces. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. In this exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Select available fields from. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. For Name. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select New Construction. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. select Spaces. more category options are available. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. For Phase. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Select Schedule building components.rvt. In the next exercise.

add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter Airflow Delta. click (Browse). In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ Click Calculated Value. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. In the Fields dialog. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Number. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .■ Under Available fields. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Discipline.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select Level. For Type. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. and then click . and then click Conditional Format. for Formula. and click OK. Header. Select Ascending. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Airflow Delta. and then select Hidden field. select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Then by. select HVAC. For Fields. Select Formula. select Air Flow. enter . double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. and Blank line. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Formula. select Not Between.

and click OK. Under Conditions to Use. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In the next lesson. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. a view opens that contains the selected space. ■ The schedule displays. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In the Color dialog. For Background Color. click the color swatch. In later exercises. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. select red.■ ■ ■ For Value. verify that Show is highlighted. In this exercise. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. right-click to access schedule properties. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Click OK twice. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text.

78 .

you modify air terminal parameters. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). As you place the air terminals. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. After completing the air systems lesson. 79 . In this lesson. Then. and work with the airflow schedule. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After system creation. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will create supply air systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.

rvt. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 3 In the ceiling view. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and scroll to space 223.

select the diffuser. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 On the Options Bar. and select Supply Diffuser .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter 425 CFM. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face. 15 On the Options Bar. as shown. and press Enter. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Also. for Flow. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 9 On the Placement panel. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. If the host element is modified or moved. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . the hosted elements are updated as well. and press Enter. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. verify that Constrain is cleared. type 12. and then press Esc to end the command. 17 Move the cursor down.

29 Place 2 diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and then press Esc. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.rfa. 27 Select Return Diffuser . select one of the diffusers. click Place on Face. As you place the return diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the drawing area. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. Next. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and click Open. 25 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 24 In the Open dialog. click Yes. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. clear Leader. 21 On the Options Bar.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click to select the lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. click Yes. 31 In the alert dialog. for Reference. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 32 In the Project Browser. Level. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. as shown. select Strong Reference. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click OK. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. select one of the return diffusers. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

For the start point. click the Level 1 line. ■ ■ For the end point. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Constraints ➤ Offset. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . enter 9' 0"2750. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. and click OK. 44 Zoom in to space 115.

verify that Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. However. After creating the logical connection. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. the space crossing lines display. When you highlight a space. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.HVAC Plan . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.Press Esc. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. including energy analysis. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. You then create the logical connection between the system components. right-click the title. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and click View ➤ Systems.

13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and Flow value. On the Options Bar. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 .IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 12 In the System Browser. 15 Click Cancel. 11 In the drawing area. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. System Name. As you add diffusers to systems. the number of elements is updated. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. review the Number of Elements. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Connect Into.

and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 25 Click OK. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. under Identity Data. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and the system connects them. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. for Mark. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In this exercise. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 22 Click OK. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. under Mechanical.17 Using the method learned previously. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 18 Click OK. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In this exercise. the air terminals are the children. for System Name. Rename the system Next. which updates the name in the System Browser.

In this case. which provides various layout tools.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. for Solution Type. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 4 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.HVAC Plan. Also.rvt. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A Generate Layout tab displays. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. indicating that it’s the active view. the Network type provides several solutions. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and display solution 1. 5 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select the upper left diffuser. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. the space crossing lines display. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select Network.

WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 9' 10 1/2". you’ll get an error in a later step. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 9 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Duct Type. For Duct Type.7 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. click Settings. Click OK. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . enter 9' 10 1/2". For Maximum Flex Duct Length. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Select Branch. For Offset. enter 3'. click Modify. For Offset.Round. For Flex Duct Type.

The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components.11 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. as is the elbow itself. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. or manually modify the duct. For example. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.

select Duct Color Fill . and equipment. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. a disconnection exists. for Values Displayed. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you can verify connectivity as you create a system. fittings. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Using a flow-based color scheme. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. and click to select it. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. and then click OK. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. thus it is not part of the system. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Usually. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area.Flow. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. but not all values are used in this view. under Graphics. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. If the entire network does not highlight.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. select By View. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. for Color Scheme. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. The first time you press Tab. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. and click OK.

select Duct Color Fill . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. for Schemes. and on the Options Bar. and press Enter.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select one of the diffusers in the system.Velocity. under Mechanical . Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the WSHP. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and then press Esc to clear the selection. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 .Airflow. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the color scheme legend. and click OK. for Flow. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click OK. 20 In the drawing area. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM).

100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .08 in-wg/100ft. highlight a segment of the duct. and select 16". Select Only. Under Constraints. and then click to select it. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Select the upper segment of main duct. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select Friction. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Calculated Size Only. The ductwork and fittings are updated. for Branch Sizing. and enter . Select Restrict Height. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and drag it to the right. Click OK. click Cancel.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.

33 Move the cursor over the system components. pressure. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. and pressure loss. Use the information that displays (flow. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Using this tool. static pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Training Files. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.rvt. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. also known as the critical path. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 35 Click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i.NOTE As you inspect a system.

4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and click Draw Duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design is highlighted. and click to specify the end of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and select the WSHP.

select the top right diffuser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the ViewCube.3D MEP. select 9' 10 1/2". Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. and click Draw Duct. double-click MEP . Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 14 In the Project Browser. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. click the corner where the Top. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Front. 11 On the Options Bar. right-click the connector grip. NOTE When drawing duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). Also. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value. The ductwork is automatically created. in space 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. it is considered a closed loop. 22 Using the same method. 19 In the drawing area.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.

25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You can ignore the warning. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.

30 Press Esc twice. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and click to select it. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.

select a segment of the main duct. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. clear Restrict Height. for Flow. such as a plenum.Airflow.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Constraints. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click OK. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 40 Using the same method. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and then click OK. under Mechanical .

In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. 109 . or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. including 2 base mounted pumps. Create return and supply piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Then. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. on level 3 of the building model.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you place mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.

indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select WSHP .High Efficiency . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. in corridor 328.2-6 Tons .Horizontal .HVAC Plan .Left Return . verify that Wall faces is selected.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 On the Options Bar. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .

) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP. click the dimension. and in the Type Selector. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and enter 2'.8 Click the corridor wall face. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to place the dimension. as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 10 Select the WSHP.

17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 12 GPM. as shown. and click to place it in the mechanical room.14 Click Modify. Under Mechanical. Click OK. enter 9'. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. for Water Flow. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the 2 WSHPs. for Offset.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. you create the return and supply piping systems. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create the logical connection between the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. including flow and pressure.21 Click Modify. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.

and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Unlike logical connections (systems). In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Mech 330). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. You can create pipes to connect system components. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . but without a corresponding system. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . analyses cannot be performed. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. where it is easier to review the information. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and click View ➤ Piping. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. click Training Files. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the Systems column heading. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating a Piping System | 115 . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.Design is highlighted. 5 In the System Browser.

Notice that on the Options Bar. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. for System Name. 10 On the Options Bar. Assigning a system component to an existing system. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. select the 2 WSHPs. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This display indicates that the system is selected. As you assign equipment to systems. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Therefore. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. while pressing Ctrl. 12 In the drawing area.In the System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. select the boiler. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. and the Edit System tool is not active. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system.

for System Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.13 Click Finish Editing System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 17 On the Options Bar. and select the cooling tower. You have created the hydronic return system. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. double-click Roof . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. under Design ➤ HVAC . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.Design. Creating a Piping System | 117 .

the boiler supplies heated water to the system. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .22 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 28 Using the same method. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. and click Select. expand the Hydronic Return system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 29 Right-click CHWS. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and click Expand All. and bypasses the cooling tower. In cooling mode. indicating the logical connection. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 25 Select the boiler. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 26 Click Finish Editing System. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and click OK. In heating mode. 23 Close the roof plan view. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements.

and click OK. including the flow rate and size of the component. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click Properties.In the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. for Water Flow. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Column Settings. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 32 In the System Browser. you can view several parameters. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. expand Piping. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 30 Right-click the Systems column heading.

and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and click to select it. 10 Click OK. and click OK. 5 In the Filter dialog.Mech 330). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Select a System dialog. press Tab to highlight the system.rvt. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. select CHWR. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC plan view range are highlighted. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. you can place the cursor over a system component. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. then the Select a System dialog displays. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). select Mechanical Equipment. When you draw a box to select components. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. the boiler. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.HVAC Plan . A system preview displays in red. click Check None. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. It does not reference the architecture. 13 Click Cancel. select Perimeter.11 On the Options Bar. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. click Settings. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 14 On the Generate Layout tab. duct. verify that Solutions is selected. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. structural beams. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. or architectural components. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. enter 1' 6''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset.

122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 19 In the drawing area.16 Click Finish Layout. to display the path with thinner lines. 17 Optionally. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. and the flow for the other is 12. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. the flow for one WSHP is 18. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and press Tab 3 times. With each Tab.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . and click OK. under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. and click OK. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 24 Press Esc. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 23 Under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 32 Click Finish Editing System. the Number of Elements is now 8.Design ➤ Floor Plans. which propagates flow throughout the system. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. double-click Level 1 . Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). Next. On the Options Bar. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 27 On the System Tools panel.Design. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . click Edit System. Logically. 28 In the Project Browser. you physically close the CHWR loop.

access its instance properties.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and click Cancel. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. 38 Using the same method. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. select a WSHP. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 35 Using the drag control. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. as shown. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 .

Click Settings. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. select Perimeter 1 of 5. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. For Slope.40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 0''/12''. For Inset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 1' 6''. and then click OK. 41 Click OK. select CHWS. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove.

47 In the drawing area. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 46 Click Modify. 48 While pressing Ctrl.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. In a later exercise. as shown.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.

you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.50 Using the same method. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Either relocate the system components. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 51 Click Finish Layout. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. select a different layout solution. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Add piping to close the supply loop. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. To create the piping system. or offset elevations are incorrect.

You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt.HVAC Plan . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.Design ➤ 3D Views. As you work in the training file. click Training Files. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. double-click 3D HVAC Building. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. and the return pipes are magenta.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 7 In the plan view. 6 Press Delete. as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 In the 3D view. select the boiler. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .

select the boiler. The connections are automatically created. and the boiler is connected to the return piping.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and click Draw Pipe. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the return pipe riser. and the lower one is secondary. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 13 In the plan view. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 12 In the 3D view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.

enter 1' . if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and press Enter. for Offset. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.In a plan view. and you select 1 connector.7''. enter 2'. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . ■ Move the cursor down. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.

select the primary base mounted pump. As you place piping runs that are close together. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. as shown. 18 Press Esc twice. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and select it. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and the appropriate fittings are created. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. 19 In the plan view. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.

NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . 28 Press Esc.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and when the connector point displays. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 29 If necessary. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 27 Move the cursor to the right. and click the minus symbol. click to connect to the pump. and click to draw the pipe. you select the tee fitting. right-click the bottom connector.

select the primary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the discharge connector. 33 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. enter 4'. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.

35 Using the method learned previously. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. these pipe connections were created automatically.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. type 1'. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. enter 9' 6''.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter. right-click the bottom control on the tee.

select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. Next. right-click. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.

43 Press Esc. 41 Using the same method. and click OK. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . under Mechanical. under Mechanical.50 or 50% of the Flow. 48 In the plan view. notice that under Mechanical. view the properties for the secondary pump. When you create the pumps in parallel. Connect the cooling tower Next. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 Press Esc. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). right-click. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the value is 0 GPM. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 40 Click Cancel. as shown. The flow is being propagated through the piping. for Cooling Water Flow. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. select the cooling tower. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. and click Element Properties.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc.

and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and close the dialog. click Training Files. When the valve is open. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. the water bypasses the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding Valves In this exercise. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50 In the 3D View. select the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is heated by the boiler. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.

and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Adding Valves | 143 .HVAC Plan . 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 8 Press Esc twice. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select Ball Valve .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.Design is highlighted.

2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. place another Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. parallel to the previously placed valve.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Select Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. 14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.

19 Using the same method. and click OK. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Valves | 145 . You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and select Ball Valve . 20 Select the bypass valve. and click Element Properties. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. under Mechanical.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Ball Valve .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). right-click. In heating mode. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.

The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Initially.HVAC Plan . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.rvt. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.22 Using the method you just learned.

Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Flow. click Pipe Color Fill . Sizing Pipe | 147 . select Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Size. for Schemes. and click OK. and click OK.

Select And. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. enter 5 FPS. select Friction. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and enter 2. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). select Larger of Connector and Calculated. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Click OK. and click to select the branch. and for Velocity. for Branch Sizing. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Under Constraints. 13 Press Esc.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps.25 FT/100ft.

The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Inspecting the System | 149 .rvt. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. select a different layout solution. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components. Using the System Inspector. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. pressure. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. or offset elevations are incorrect.

4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. as required. flow. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. An inspection flag reports the section number. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). This information helps you modify the system design.

In this exercise. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. you need to validate them. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. the Static Pressure is 7. as shown. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. targeting those systems that need attention. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . and click OK. 9 Using the same method. 10 Click Finish. and the Pressure Loss is 1.89 psi.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. select 90° F. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. and to size pipe. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. for Fluid Temperature. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.88 psi. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.67 psi. inspect Section 6 again.

the pipe is associated with that system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click View. 9 Right-click CHWS.rvt.HVAC Plan . Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Warnings display. For example. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 7 In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and for pipe sizing. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. As you learned when placing components. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. If you place components without assigning them to a system. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. double-click Level 1 . After you assign components to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. 6 In the Project Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. right-click the Systems titlebar. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and double-click Level 3 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Show to view all of the system components. After you have assigned all components to systems. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. In the System Browser.HVAC Plan . thus assigning the components to a system.Design. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 4 In the System Browser.Design. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.

expand the Unassigned folder.Design floor plan. 10 Using the same methods. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Right-click CHWR. click Close. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and click Expand All. otherwise. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . and confirm unassigned system components. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.HVAC Plan .TIP If you have multiple views open. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and select Level 3 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 12 In the System Browser. right-click Hydronic Return.

154 .

155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

156 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

select Copper. speeding up the design phase. For Temperature. Select Correction Factor. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.rvt. ■ ■ For Factor. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ ■ For Material. select Wiring Types.Wire Sizes. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. enter 1. expand Wiring . and demand factors that are applied in the design.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. enter THHN. ■ Click New Correction Factor. For Material. select 90. distribution systems. You also add a wiring type. For Temperature Rating. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Click OK. click Training Files. click (Open). As you place components and create circuits. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .04. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select 75. select Copper. wiring.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Background Color. Click OK three times. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Red. for Custom Colors. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.■ ■ For Value.

you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. 167 . Create a panel schedule. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. First. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. power circuits. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Then. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create power loads. Use the System Browser to check your design.

Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. for the Spaces Category.rvt. By using orange as the color for this range. You can create additional color schemes. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.00 fc.00 fc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. click (Open). ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Average Estimated Illumination. Under Scheme Definition. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Click OK.Lighting Color Fill view is open. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. In the Color dialog. select Orange. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. select the color for Less Than 20. for Basic Colors. select the color legend. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.5 fc range is satisfied.Lighting Ceiling plan. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) .Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.7 In the Project Browser. 13 Click the Level 2 . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The red field will clear once the +/. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.277. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. zoom to space Library 219.5 fc range. which is the lowest value in the specified range. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 8 In the Project Browser.

The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. select Multiple. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 23 Click OK. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 20 Select the lighting fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click to place the fixture. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select Multiple. 27 Press ESC to end the command. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 .

The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 36 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixtures.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. Click OK. and for Category. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .277V.

Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 41 On the Options Bar. select Multiple Alignment. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 42 In the drawing area. The lighting delta is satisfied. click the ceiling grid line as shown.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . click (Open). click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. you modify the light fixture IES files. In the next exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.45 Press ESC to end the command. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. scroll to view space space Library 219. 2 Tile the views as shown. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Color Fill plan.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Lighting Plan. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.

Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. for Ballast Loss Factor. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . enter 162. select Luminous Flux.ies and click Open. Under Photometrics. ■ Under Photometrics. select T5 [HO]. select Xenon and click OK. click the value for Initial Intensity. Under Identity Data. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics. enter .00 VA.277V and click OK. for Lamp. for Apparent Load. click the value for Light Loss Factor. and click OK. Under Electrical. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown.00 lm. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. select 463T5_S. Click OK.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.93. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.85. ■ Click OK twice. enter F15. In the Name dialog. specify 15000. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Under Photometrics. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Color Preset. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . click the value for Initial Color. ■ Click Apply. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. enter . for Type Mark. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.

11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .277V. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. Click OK. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and for Category. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 10 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixtures. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Press Delete. 15 In space Library 219. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Note the lighting delta updates again. select the top center fixture.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. In the next exercise.Press Delete. and Receptacles | 183 . The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Placing Switches.rvt. Junction Boxes. junction boxes. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. 2 In the drawing area. Junction Boxes. you add switches. click (Open). and receptacles to your design. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Placing Switches. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 7 Click to place the switch.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V.

Select Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open.NoLoad. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. and Receptacles | 185 . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 12 In the Load Family dialog. The element type Junction Boxes .

16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK twice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. for Level 2 . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. zoom to space Library 219. enter JB-1NL. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. for Mark. note the Number of Poles is 1. NOTE When entering values. Click Edit Type. 15 Select the junction box. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Under Electrical. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 21 In the drawing area. In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .14 Press ESC to end the command. enter 9’0”.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view.Offset.

right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Select Load. 26 In the System Browser. Expand General. Placing Switches. Distribution System. and Number of Elements. Space Number. right-click and click Column Settings. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Expand Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Junction Boxes. NOTE If necessary. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. and Receptacles | 187 .22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 24 For any column. and Voltage. Click OK. Select Size. 23 In the System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Space Name.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

select Copy and Multiple. Placing Switches. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and Receptacles | 189 . Junction Boxes. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. move the cursor along the wall. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.

and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .equipment. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. zoom to the space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and work toward the higher voltage. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Adding wiring to a project is optional. click (Open). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.

14 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. select 480/277 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Surface: 100A. 15 On the Options Bar. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 8 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. enter 20. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. Click OK.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter PP-2B. For Panel Name. for Max. select 120/208 Wye. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser.Loads. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Max. enter LP-2B. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. #1 Pole Breakers. enter 20. For Panel Name. 23 In the Filter dialog.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . which is the logical connection between the elements. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and for Category. Click OK.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.28 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch.

41 In the Filter dialog. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Next you create circuits without showing wire.Loads. select Wires. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. Click OK. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. enter 2. except without wire. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. for Hot Conductors.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click Check None. click (Open). 38 Press ESC to end the command. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Category.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Rating. Expand Electrical. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Voltage Drop are selected. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. and then expand circuit 1. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Voltage. expand Power. and verify that Load. Click OK. click Training Files. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. right-click on the Systems heading. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing.rvt. 13 In the System Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Distribution System. 2 In the drawing area. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 With the junction box still selected.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. under Electrical. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. change the Voltage to 277V. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Click OK. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.

for Type Mark. 40 Click OK twice. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Click Tags. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter FR4. note the label parameters and click Cancel. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . under Identity Data. Click OK. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click Edit Type. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Click Yes. click below the first one to place it. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 36 Select the upper-left fixture.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.

51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. enter a comma. and click Apply. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. and for Category. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click OK. Next you create a switch system. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. for File Name.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Click OK. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 56 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select Break. Deselect Break and for Suffix.rfa. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 52 In the Save As dialog. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Save. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. For Circuit Number.

Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical Lighting. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter a. for Switch ID. Creating a Switch System | 205 .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.rvt. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. click (Open). 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID.

20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. enter b. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.Lighting. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. for switch ID. Click OK. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. under Electrical .

The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click (Open). zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). click Check None. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. 7 In space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. and for Category. lighting. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Circuits are used for power. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 4 In the Filter dialog. and data systems.26 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Creating Power Loads | 207 . select Electrical Fixtures.

rfa. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Long Wire Tick Mark. for Hot Conductors. and in the drawing area. enter 2. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . select Wiring. 15 In the Load Family dialog. Click OK. 13 Select the wire again. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Open. and click Element Properties. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and in the right pane. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 19 Click OK.Loads. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Creating Power Loads | 209 . press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select the PP-2B panel.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220. and click to select the circuit. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .26 Press Delete. as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area.

Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. select panel LP-2B. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Next you balance the loads for your design. 2 In the drawing area. click Open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Finally.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. zoom to space Electrical 220. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. 3 In the Electrical space. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.

3712 VA. enter 30A. for Rating.3616 VA). 1-#10. Under Electrical-Loads. Click OK. and Phase C . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Scroll down.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 14 Close the warning dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. B. click Rebalance Loads. 6 Click OK. Notice that the loads on Phase A. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 1-#12. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 1-#10. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Phase B 3636 VA. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 1-#12. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

for Rating. Next you create a panel schedule. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. and click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Close the warning dialog. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. under Electrical . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule.Loads. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B.rvt. click Training Files. for Rating. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. enter 30A. under Electrical . Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Select PP-2B.15 Select panel PP-2B. and click OK. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window.Loads. enter 25A. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click (Open). 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.

214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you use the System Browser to check your design. click (Open). 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Close the report. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. and open E601 . expand Sheets (all). enter 3/32. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet.rvt. for Font Size. for Font Size. for Font. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Under Header Text. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Select the schedule. Under Header Text. click Training Files. under Other. select Bold and Italic. 11 Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Panel Schedules. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. for Appearance. click Edit. Under Body Text. enter 1/8. select Berlin Sans FB. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.

3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. In the System Browser. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. select space Lounge 212. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. press TAB once. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. Expand Unassigned. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. each with a load of 180VA.

14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select MDP-1. 17 In the drawing area. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 16 Close the details dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the dialog. under Warnings. zoom to space Electrical 214. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

and click OK.Design is open.Vent.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. In this lesson. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 2 In the Project Browser. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In this exercise. planning is critical to a successful design.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Adding a pipe size. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. in addition to loading existing families. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. you create a PVC pipe type.rvt. click Duplicate. 219 . right-click PVC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Properties. type PVC . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Sanitary. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 4 In the Name dialog.

select Tee Vent . select Tee Reducing Double Vent .DWV: Standard. 6 Click OK. 17 In the left pane. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . Tee. select Tee. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Training Files. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 27 For the new pipe size.rfa.DWV: Standard. 22 Click New Size. 10 On the Selection panel. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. enter 27/32''. 26 Click OK.0''.DWV.Sch 40 . refer to Revit MEP Online Help.Sch 40 . for Nominal. 15 For System Type. 25 For Outside. click Modify. enter 1/2''. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . click Pipe Settings. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 24 For Inside Diameter. enter -4' . and click OK.PVC . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 21 In the right pane. In the Project Browser. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Sanitary. select Plastic. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select None. enter 5/8''.PVC . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 10°. Cross.Vent is listed. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 18 For System Type. under Pipe Types. for Material. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Mechanical.Sch 40 . 13 In the right panel. Tap.PVC . PVC . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Sanitary. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. select Branch. For Offset. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. and click Main. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .

add a hot water heater. including plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. and hot and cold water piping. 221 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the cold water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. vent. Create the hot water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system.

move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. as shown. including the men’s room (space Male 107). 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. NOTE To identify a space name and number. 1 urinal. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. you add 2 toilets.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt.Plumbing Plan .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 5 On the Placement panel. select Public . Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. against the left wall. 1 wall-mounted urinal. in the Type Selector. 4 On the Element panel. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .Wall Mounted. under Water Closet . as shown. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and 3 sinks. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.Flush Valve .1.6 gpf.

and press Esc. zoom in closer.) 8 Press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. use the reference line to center the fixture. (Again.7 Click to place another toilet. under Urinal . above the first in the standard toilet space. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.Wall Hung. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.

Rectangular. In placing the fixture. click Place on Face. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). under Floor Drain .2'' Drain. 14 Click Modify. 12 On the Placement panel. select 5''x5'' Strainer .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .

and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. In this exercise. and review the components listed under this system. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. click Training Files. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. a urinal. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).rvt. and click View ➤ Piping. and a floor drain. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. clear Lines (<Overhead>). open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Only plumbing fixtures are selected. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click OK. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.Design ➤ Floor Plans. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.Design is open. 6 In the plan view. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 2 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Filter dialog. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. You include the bathroom space number in the name. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary. 11 On the Options Bar. If you deselected the drain. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 In the Systems Browser. for System Name. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 12 On the Edit System panel. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . so the Create Sanitary System is available. click Finish Editing System. enter Sanitary 107. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors.

A preview of the piping layout displays. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. select Sanitary 107. as shown. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . and click OK. 16 In the Select a System dialog. for example.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select one of the components in the system. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base is placed. a toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

23 For Offset. You accept this suggested solution. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select 4''. for Slope. select Main. and click OK. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. click Solutions. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 27 Click Modify. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. for Solution Type. for Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 24 In the left pane. 25 On the Options Bar. enter -4'-0”. enter 1/8'' / 12''. and for Offset. for Diameter. and modify it to meet project requirements. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.19 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Branch. 21 On Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Settings. select Intersections. The default settings are automatically modified. enter -1' 0''.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

30 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 31 Click Modify. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown.

34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. as shown. adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting.

4 On the Element panel. 5 On the Placement panel.Design is open. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. as shown. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. in the Type Selector. select 22''x22'' .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Lavatory .Rectangular.rvt. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. click Training Files.Public. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 .

select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. For example. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. TIP When entering dimensions. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . and press Enter to create a second sink.7 Click Modify. On the Options Bar. enter 2' 4''. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. 8 Select the sink.

and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Press Esc. 15 Click the 3 sinks.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. click Finish Editing System. 16 On the Edit System panel. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Add To System. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.

right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). as shown. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing . use the ViewCube to orient the view. 19 In the 3D view. 22 In the plan view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 21 Select the tee. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 20 Select the fitting.In the System Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing.Design ➤ 3D Views. with the tee fitting selected. and click Draw Pipe. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

for Offset. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Slope.6''. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click to draw the pipe. and click Apply. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. In this example. press Spacebar. enter 2' . When you press the Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green.

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. move the cursor over the stub pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . select Standard. under Wye 45 Deg Double .PVC . 32 Select the double wye fitting.Sch 40 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 31 Click Modify. click to place the fitting. 30 In the 3D view. 29 In the Type Selector.DWV. and when the vertical center line displays.

enter 6''. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. for Offset. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 34 Press Esc. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 36 In the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. right-click the right connector. double-click the section head to open the section view. on the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1'. and press Enter. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. In the next steps.33 With the fitting selected. 37 Select the fitting.

Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. and click to place the pipe.

44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. right-click the bottom connector. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 47 Move the cursor down. and press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. 46 In the section view. 49 Using the same method. 48 Click Modify. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. enter 6''.

51 In the Type Selector. 55 In the 3D view. select the P-Trap on the left. 56 Using the same method. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . select Standard. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 53 Using the same method.DWV.PVC . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. under Trap P .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . 54 Click Modify. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 52 In the plan view.

and press Enter. In the plan view. enter 6''. Click in the plan view. select the left P-Trap.. Move the cursor to the left. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify. Select the double wye pipe on the left.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the right sink to the double wye. 58 Using the same method. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.

■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. In the Type Selector. under Pipe Types. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . while pressing Ctrl.■ In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select PVC Sanitary. as shown. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Press Esc. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. and select a proposed solution. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions.

62 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. for Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Finish. and verify the slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.rvt.

5 Select the tee. select the elbow fitting on the right. as shown.Overall. 10 In the 3D view. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Sch 40 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 7 On the Selection panel. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . right-click the top connector.PVC . and click the intersection to place the fitting.Plumbing Plan .Design. 9 In the Type Selector. and click to draw the pipe.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Section view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Floor level line. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select the vertical stack. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.DWV. click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . select Standard.

11 Click Modify. 13 Click the rotate control once. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Sch 40 . click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.DWV. 17 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. select Standard. 18 In the plan view. as shown. for Offset. enter 1'-0”. 12 Select the fitting. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Plug .PVC . 15 Press Esc.

rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan .Design is open. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.19 Click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.

minimize the Sanitary system. enter 9' 3''. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. select Domestic Cold Water. and sinks. expand Unassigned. for System Type. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Domestic Hot Water. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Branch. 15 In the plan view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . draw a selection box to select the toilets. verify that the value is 9' 0''. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. click Check None. select Domestic Hot Water. For Offset. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 4 In the right pane. 17 In the Filter dialog. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Pipe Types: Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 7 In the left pane. select Plumbing Fixtures. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. select Pipe Types: Water. and click OK. and for System Type. 14 In the System Browser. For Offset.) 10 Click OK. urinal. for System Type. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . To minimize opportunities for piping interference.Overall. select Main. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing . 6 In the left pane. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .Design ➤ 3D Views. 9 In the left pane. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and click Main. select Branch. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. if necessary.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 21 On the Edit System panel. For Flow Conversion Method. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. click Finish Editing System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 On the System Tools panel.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. In the System Browser. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. enter DCW 107. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. click Edit System. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

For Offset.2 7/8''. 28 In the Type Selector. as shown. For Slope. enter 7''. enter 0”/12”. and press Enter. enter 3' . and click the connector. 33 Click Modify. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left. at the intersection of the water main pipe. select the sink above the urinal. right-click the top DCW connector. and press Enter. 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 On the Options Bar. enter 4'0”. enter 10'. select 3/4''. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. select Water. for Offset. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click to the left of the urinal. 34 In the plan view. connect the second toilet. and click Draw Pipe. and click to place the pipe. 30 In the plan view. 32 Move the cursor to the right. under Pipe Types. as shown. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 35 In the Type Selector.25 Using the same method. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.

select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click OK. 41 Select the top sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 40 Click Modify. and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 42 In the Select Connector dialog.39 Move the cursor to the left. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

44 Using the same method. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. add a water heater. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the hot water system.

6 In the plan view.Plumbing Plan . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Overall. while pressing Ctrl. 5 In the System Browser. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 2 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. expand the Unassigned folder. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files.Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select the 3 sinks. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.

the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 12 In the Type Selector. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.Tankless. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. under Water Heater . for System Name. 15 In the System Browser. as shown.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room.6 Gallon. you edit the system to add equipment. 13 In the plan view. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click OK. and click Edit System. select 0. in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Cold Water.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. Default Domestic Hot Water. In later steps. 10 In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. When designing systems. 14 Click Modify.

enter 10’. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. select the water heater. and on the Edit System panel. 24 Move the cursor up. 25 On the Options Bar. as shown. and click the water main line. 26 Move the cursor to the right. for Offset. and press Enter. click Finish Editing System. right-click the middle left connector. 27 Click Modify. Offset: 4' 6''. 19 Select the water heater. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . and select Draw Pipe. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. enter 1' 6''. 23 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Slope: 0''/12''. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 22 In the Type Selector.

right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 33 On the Edit System panel. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Edit System. select a sink. select Domestic Hot Water 107. select 4'-6''. for Offset. enter 1''. click Finish Editing System. as shown. for Diameter. and on the Placement Tools panel. enter 9' 0''. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 37 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor to the right. and in the System Selector. and for Offset. 36 Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. 30 On the System Tools panel.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 35 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter 1' 6''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

40 On the Options Bar. 42 Click Modify. enter 1’. 41 Move the cursor down.39 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink. for Offset. enter 2' 8''. as shown. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 .

select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

you can choose to save your work. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. In this tutorial. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. If the tutorial training files are not present. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 267 . see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. click Training Files. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You create a new pipe type. In this lesson. However. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. go to http://www.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and click Duplicate. After finishing each exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. 2 Right-click Standard. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.rvt. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Main. In the next exercise. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. For Pipe Type. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Pipe Type. for Material. Next. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Carbon Steel. In this exercise. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. In the left pane. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. or architectural components. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. verify that 9' 0" is selected.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. However. For Offset. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Fire Protection Wet. duct. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. you modify the type properties of the pipe. under Mechanical. For System Type. For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. click Rename. select Fire Protection Wet. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For Offset. and then click OK. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. verify that 9' 0" is specified. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. structural beams. and click Properties. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone.

8 Using a crossing window. select Fire Protection. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. click Add. under Fire Protection. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and then click OK. 6 In the drawing area. enter Sprinkler Zone. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select the upper half of the building. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. indicating that it’s the active view. Under Categories.rvt. select Spaces.Design is highlighted. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. right-click. enter Zone 1. for Name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 5 Click OK twice. the space crossing lines display.Fire Protection Plan . and click Element Properties. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone. including a calculated value parameter. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then access instance properties. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces.rvt. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 In the Filter dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. select Zone 1. enter Zone 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Fire Protection. to which you add various parameters. and then click OK. you create schedules for sprinkler design. under Fire Protection. 13 Using the same method. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

enter Light. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. and on the ribbon. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. click the Formatting tab. select Maximum Spacing. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection.Design is highlighted. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Spaces. enter 15. The schedule displays. click Add Parameter. enter Protection Area Construction Type. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . enter Maximum Spacing. for Name. For Rounding. select Length.Fire Protection Plan . 10 In the Format dialog. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Fire Protection. and click Field Format. indicating that it’s the active view. Select Schedule keys. For Group parameter under. 7 Click OK. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Obstructed-Combustible. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Name. select To the nearest 1'. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Units. 6 Using the same method. Click OK. 9 On the Formatting tab. double-click on each column separator. In the Maximum Spacing column. Click OK. For Key name. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Type of Parameter. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 14 Select the new header. 11 Click OK twice. select Feet and fractional inches.

Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. select Spaces. For Name. and press Enter. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. under Available fields. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. enter 130. 16 Using the same method. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Click OK. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab.

22 Click OK twice. Select Header and Blank line. In the Fields dialog. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. and click View Properties. select Sprinkler Zone. Enter the formula operator / after Area. under Other. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Area. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. and click OK. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Rounding. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. select Fixed. select Common. select 0 decimal place. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. for Sort by. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Formula. click Edit. select Number. select Level. click . Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and click Field Format. For Type. For Discipline. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Then by. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 20 On the Formatting tab. for Sorting/Grouping. For Units. 19 Click the Formatting tab.

On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Minimum Sprinklers. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. select Grand totals. select Level. click Edit. At the bottom of the dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Number. For Then by (second instance). ■ In the Format dialog. and click View Properties. and then click Field Format. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. right-click the schedule. 27 In the drawing area. and select Totals only. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Filter by. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Hidden field. Under Field formatting. For Fields. 30 Click OK twice. and then select Hidden field. select Level equals Level 2. for Filter.

select Grand totals. select Calculate totals.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. For Category. and click View Properties. select Embedded Schedule. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. delete the word Maximum. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. and select Totals only. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. under Other. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . for Fields. select Count. System Name. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. click Edit. double-click Type. and Count. for Available fields. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Under Field formatting. select Sprinklers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group.

select Ordinary. As a result. Unobstructed. 48 In the floor plan. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. and access the instance properties. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Light.Fire Protection Plan Design. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 52 Click OK. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Identity Data. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. double-click FP . notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. 46 With the space still selected. 43 Click Cancel. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 In the plan view. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. under Identity Data. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 44 In the schedule. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. but their values are not determined. select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed. and click OK. for Protection Area Construction Type. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. for Protection Area Construction Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Ordinary. under Identity Data. 50 Access the instance properties.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. go to http://www. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.rvt. As you place the sprinklers.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. At the end of this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog.autodesk. you will understand the process. you can choose to save your work. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. By following the recommended workflow.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you create the system. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. After finishing each exercise. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. click Training Files. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. 279 . it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. However. methodology. If the tutorial training files are not present. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 3 In the Project Browser.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. When this happens. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. After placing the initial sprinkler. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.

place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. select the sprinklers that you placed.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.Pendent . 10 Press Esc twice. 11 In the drawing area. 9 In space Instruction 202. and select Sprinkler . Adding Sprinklers | 281 . You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. and click to place 3 sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. as shown.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.

12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. you place non-hosted sprinklers. verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar. Also. as shown. and then press Esc. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Next.

you adjust the offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.Fire Protection Plan . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 17 In the Project Browser. move the cursor to the right. enter 10' 6". 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 18 Type WT.FP_Ceiling view. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. under Constraints. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Notice that the schedule updates. enter 11. you place non-hosted sprinklers. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and 200C). open Design ➤ FP .Design. specify a vertical offset. This number is determined in the schedule. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. and click Element Properties. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 200B. 29 Press Esc. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and press Enter. 19 In the floor plan. for Offset. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Next. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. For Number. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 25 Click OK. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. enter 14' 6".

click Training Files. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. After creating the logical connection. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . However.Fire Protection Plan . you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.rvt. and with piping (physical connection). you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. In the next exercise. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Design is highlighted. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.30 Close the file with or without saving it. Unlike logical connections (systems). This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.

5 Right-click the header. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. click View ➤ Systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. as shown. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. and select Piping. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. within the Piping Systems folder. Creating a Piping System | 285 . As you assign sprinklers to systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. named Fire Protection Wet.

for System Name. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select an initial piping layout. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. system equipment. 12 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and select the system. 13 In the System Browser. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and click Select. 15 In the drawing area. In the left pane. indicating the logical connection. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Wet is selected. Next. 11 With the system still selected. click Settings. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and number of elements in the system. and a piping layout preview displays. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. The Edit Piping System panel displays. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. enter FP Wet_Zone2. providing system editing tools. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. select Branch. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. 19 Click OK. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. For Offset. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . press Tab. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. For Pipe Type. and on the Options Bar. verify that Main is selected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection .

22 On the Options Bar. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system.20 On the Generate Layout panel. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . and select solution 5. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. click Solutions. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. verify that Network is selected. enter -12' 0". the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. click Place Base. In general. and green represents branch lines). as shown. When the layout is finished. select 2". 23 For Offset. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. for Diameter. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0").

A (parallel movement control) displays. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. click Modify. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 29 Click Finish Layout. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Next. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. or that offset elevations are incorrect. and then you create piping to physically connect them. and various manual pipe creation tools. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. select a different layout solution. the Connect Into tool. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 32 If necessary. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 If necessary. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in.Fire Protection Plan . click Training Files. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt.

click Add To System. radiators. air terminals. 8 In the corridor. for Solution Type. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and select solution 5. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. you can select the pipe or duct. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 11 On the Generate Layout panel. and so on) are logically connected by a system. and pipe or duct is created. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. or a system component to display system tools. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. verify that Network is selected. 14 Close the System Browser. 5 In the drawing area. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. click Finish Editing System. 9 On the Edit System panel. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 12 On the Options Bar. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 18 Click Finish Editing System. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. verify that Solutions is selected. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. mechanical equipment. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 13 Click Finish Layout.

and then tile the views. and click Draw Pipe. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 28 In the drawing area.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 29 Using the same method. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 24 In the Piping Plan.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. select 9'. and then press Esc. for Offset. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. right-click.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 21 In the Piping Plan.

zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 31 In the plan view.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . Because the whole system highlights.

select 1/4" = 1'-0". ■ 6 Press Esc.rvt. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. click Training Files. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design is highlighted. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. for Scale. indicating that it’s the active view. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 On the Options Bar.Fire Protection Plan .

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter.21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . and then tag the piping as shown. select 1 1/4". 24 In the drawing area. The pipe diameter is modified.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 26 Using the same method. 23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. as shown. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. and maximize the floor plan.

The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You added tags to pipes. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. For additional practice. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this exercise. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you created a wet fire protection system. In this tutorial.

add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 .

306 .

a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. right-click Level 1. and view references. right-click Copy of Level 1. 2 In the Project Browser. matchlines. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.rvt. and click OK. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. under Floor Plans. and apply a view template. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 307 . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. dependent views. and click Properties.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. If the view included detail graphics.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.

as shown. and click OK. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 6 In the Project Browser. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C.rvt. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. more focused. 4 Using the same method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Apply Default View Template. and then press Esc. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. create dependent views for areas B and C. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 9 Click OK. views and put them on the sheet. 10 In the drawing area. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.

apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. For Line Pattern. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select Double Dash 5/8". select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 13 Press Esc twice./ ---). for Target view. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Click OK. select 11. For Line Weight. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . on the Options Bar. select black. 21 Using the same method. click the current value. and then press Esc. 20 Select the upper view reference and. 19 In the drawing area. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. In the Color dialog.

22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 27 Using the same method. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. as shown. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and zoom to each of the view references. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method.

2 Zoom in. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Domestic Water. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Click OK. and click Apply Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and select the section box. enter Plumbing Isometric . The section crop lines no longer display. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system.29 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. Under Graphics. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 .rvt. For Default View Template.Domestic Water. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. select Plumbing Isometric. For Sub-Discipline. and click Properties. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. click Training Files. select Plumbing. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Plumbing Isometric . for View Classification. 4 In the Project Browser. for View Name. select Documentation. and click to select it.

10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. Click Apply. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". select Dash. For Pattern. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 12 Using the same method. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click to select it. and then click OK.9 Right-click. press Tab 3 times. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. select 3. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.

13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). 14 Right-click. and click to select it.

314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . highlight a segment of the sanitary piping.Domestic Water view with detailing. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. click Reveal Hidden Elements.Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . 17 Label the fixtures as shown.15 Press Esc. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. Right-click. and click to select it. In the drawing area. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. press Tab 3 times. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 18 Using methods learned previously. On the View Control Bar.

20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. For Slope. 25 Press Esc twice. for Rounding. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. verify that Common is selected. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. and click to place the spot slope annotation. When the view is associated with a sheet. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. as shown. click on the Format value. select To the nearest 1/8". the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 21 Click OK twice. In the Format dialog.

select 1/4"=1'-0''. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 5 On the Options Bar. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. click Training Files. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).rvt. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. for Scale.

Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. for Line Weight. 13 In the Project Browser. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. drag it to the sheet. using the same method. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. under Sheets (all). double-click M601 . select 5.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. Click OK. right-click the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 17 In the Project Browser. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and click Apply Default View Template. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Default View Template. and select the viewport. For Title on Sheet. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

under Names. and click OK. and click Rename. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click Apply View Template. and click OK. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. right-click the detail view. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 25 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.

Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and annotation to create a legend. 321 . you learn how to: ■ add text notes. duct tags. ■ work with model-based components. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. linetypes. symbols. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.

you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. click Training Files. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 8 With the text still selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).Creating Annotations In this exercise.

Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. and a segment of rectangular duct. as shown. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. select a supply diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct. and then click Right Straight. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 16 In the drawing area. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Creating Annotations | 323 . Add leaders 10 Select the text box.9 Press Esc twice. verify that Leader is cleared. a return diffuser.

23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. If necessary. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. clear Leader.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. and click Open. click Load. 24 On the Options Bar.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 22 In the Tags dialog. 17 Click Modify. 20 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the Load Family dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. under Category. for Ducts.rfa. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. and click OK. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. as shown. select Horizontal. and then press Esc.25 In the drawing area. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Annotations | 325 . select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 26 On the Options Bar. Leader. 32 In the drawing area. and Attached End. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.

34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. for Leader.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End.

and lock lighting fixtures. lay out. 39 In the Type Properties dialog.36 Press Esc twice. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Using the method learned previously. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. That’s because you changed a type property. for Leader Arrowhead. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions | 327 . and all elements of that type are affected. not simply an instance property. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and click OK. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. select Dot Open 1/16". select the last tag placed.

select the dimension line. indicating that it’s the active view. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Press Esc. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. and then select the interior face of the wall. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension.rvt.

lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. and notes. and press Enter. 16 Press Esc. click the 3 interior locks on the line. enter 8'. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.3 1/2"). Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Legend | 329 . Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . and offset them 8' from the wall. annotation symbols. 19 Using the same methods. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. linework. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the dimensions are locked.13 Using the same method.

8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. click below the title to place the diffuser. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For View. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 10 Using the same method. click Training Files. For Scale. 5 Click in the drawing area. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Floor Plan. Click OK. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. enter Diffuser Legend.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .8 Neck. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1/4" = 1' -0".

11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.

332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . The selected detail lines are now thin.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 24 Select the component’s break line.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 26 Press Esc.DROP and its text note. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 21 Press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl.

36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 34 Using the method learned previously. enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.MECHANICAL LEGEND. Creating a Legend | 333 .

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc.

rvt. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. 335 . Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. and text. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.113 East elevation view. indicating that it’s the active view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing 15 In this lesson. click Training Files. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A detail callout that references another view. A drafting view using detail components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. detail groups.

113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 4 On the Options Bar. Next. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. place Power Riser .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 7 Drag the Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. select each of the 2 panelboards. clear Leader. and click to place it. 8 Using the same method. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. and then modify and align the views. 5 In the drawing area. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .113 East on the sheet.

under Identity Data. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. right-click. and click Deactivate View. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 13 Right-click. select the 113 North view. and click Activate View. for Title on Sheet.9 Press Esc. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click OK. giving the appearance of a single view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Press Esc. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. select the 113 East elevation view. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and click Activate View. 21 Using the drag control. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. you add wiring to the diagram. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. 19 Select the Level 1 line.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. In the next exercise. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again.

8 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. In the New Subcategory dialog.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view. expand Lines. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. select 6. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . for Line Weight. for Name. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Chain is selected. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.113 North view.rvt. and click OK. and then click OK. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 Beginning at the transformer. As you draw. notice that there are no snaps active. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click New. Under Modify Subcategories. 2 Close the Project Browser. In the Line Styles dialog. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. enter Electrical Power. as shown.

10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). as shown. 11 Using the same method. enter 1/8". 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.

Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. so that the result is as shown.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. as shown. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 29 Click Modify. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 28 Click above the cap. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).

33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. select Multiple. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.31 While pressing Ctrl. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

enter 0 0. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 42 On the Options Bar. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.5. enter 3/32". Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and press Enter. for Offset.36 Press Esc. and then press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 40 Press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.

while pressing Ctrl.125. and then press Esc. and click OK. select all 3 lines. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Using the same method.25. Press Esc. 46 In the Project Browser. expand Groups ➤ Detail. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. and press Enter. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you can ensure that they stay together. for Name. enter 0 0. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. click on the length dimension value. enter Ground. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 47 In the drawing area. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 50 With the group selected. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line.

and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 54 Select the group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 52 Select the detail group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.51 Using the method learned previously. TP-2B.

select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). for Name. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 4 Right-click the ViewCube.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 2 Right-click the copy. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. In later exercises. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and will place it on sheet E01. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and click OK.

Back. 7 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then click the corner where the Top. click Home.6 Select the section box. and then press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .

right-click. Click OK. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and click Apply View Template. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Walkthroughs. select 3D HVAC Iso. select 3D Views.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Under Names. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. (Right). click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. as shown.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor down and to the left. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 15 Using the same method. Typical. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and click to specify the second leader point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 19 Complete the text labels. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.

select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. as shown. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 23 Click on the crop region. 25 Click OK.To rotate and reposition a text label. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and under Extents. and then click OK. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . under Extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.

select the isometric view. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click the view name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. For Scale. click Training Files. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. select 3" = 1'-0". and click Properties. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .rvt. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.29 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Place a detail component.

8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). For View Classification. select Documentation. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. for Sub-Discipline. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Click OK. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 12 On the Element panel. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as the rectangle start point. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 Zoom in to the component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. select Plumbing. 13 In the drawing area. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click the point at the top of the drain.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

22 Click Modify. and click OK. 18 With the filled region still selected. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. select the filled region. (Line). for Type. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. and then press Esc.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the drawing area. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.I. select C.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.P. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 20 Select 1. Concrete. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.

34 Press Esc. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. select Multiple. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.28 Click Modify. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click to select them. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click point 6 as the endpoint.

43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 40 Click Finish Region. and then select the side of the slab above the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. (Rectangle). 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then press Esc. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. as shown.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 45 Using the method learned previously.

47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.D. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 49 Click Modify. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. as shown. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. for Name. and click OK.. select the Flashing Membrane group. press Tab to highlight the chain. draw wide detail lines as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog. and then click to select them.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.

61 Using the same method.55 Press Esc. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.

66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 71 Click Modify. and then click OK. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 72 If necessary. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 67 On the Options Bar. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. and use the grips to resize the masking region. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 70 In the Keynotes dialog.62 Press Esc twice.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing.

81 Select the text note. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 80 Press Esc twice.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the text insertion point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 76 To select the leader start point.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

and then press Esc twice. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the view title.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and click to place it. 90 Press Esc. 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .

Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation.dwg. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. For A-----NPP. For Layers. select Visible. For Colors. select Black and White. you import a CAD detail drawing. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Auto-Detect. Click OK.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. for Line Weight. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial.rvt. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For Import units. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. select 3. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. Click Open. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.8 Type ZF. 11 Press Esc. open P103 . Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the viewport title. 12 In the drawing area.

366 .